blob: 1614b2fc3bf69ee856787a6b36e921842720aa58 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050087struct device;
88
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040089/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020090 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
91 *
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010093 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020094 */
95enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010097 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020098};
99
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200100#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
101
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200102/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800103 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
108 */
109enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
110 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
111 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
113 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
114};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200115#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800116
117/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400118 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
119 *
120 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100121 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400122 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400123 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200124 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
125 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400126 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100127 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300128 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200129 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700131struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200132 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100133 u16 cw_min;
134 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300136 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200137 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700138};
139
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700140struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
141 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
143 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
144 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
145};
146
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100147/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200148 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
153 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200155 */
156enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200162};
163
164/**
165 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
166 *
167 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
168 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
169 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100170 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200171 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200183 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200184
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
186
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100187 bool radar_enabled;
188
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100189 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190};
191
192/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
194 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
195 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
196 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
197 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
198 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
199 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
200 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
201 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
202 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
203 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
204 * for changes/removal.)
205 */
206enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
207 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
208 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
209};
210
211/**
212 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
213 *
214 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
215 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
216 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
217 * done.
218 *
219 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
220 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
221 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
222 */
223struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
227};
228
229/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100230 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
231 *
232 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
233 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
234 *
235 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
236 * also implies a change in the AID.
237 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
238 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300239 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700240 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200241 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200242 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200243 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
244 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
245 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
246 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
247 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
248 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200249 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200250 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300251 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200252 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
253 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200254 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200255 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200256 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300257 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200258 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100259 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
260 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300261 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
262 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100263 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
264 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
265 * context had been assigned.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100266 */
267enum ieee80211_bss_change {
268 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
269 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
270 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300271 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200272 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200273 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200274 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200275 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
276 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
277 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200278 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200279 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300280 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200281 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200282 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300283 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200284 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300285 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200286 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100287 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300288 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100289 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200290
291 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100292};
293
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300294/*
295 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
296 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
297 * filtering will be disabled.
298 */
299#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
300
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100301/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700302 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
303 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
304 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
305 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
306 */
307enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
308 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
309 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
310};
311
312/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100313 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
314 *
315 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
316 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
317 *
318 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200319 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
320 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530321 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100322 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
323 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200324 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
325 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
326 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
327 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
328 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
329 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100330 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200331 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300332 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200333 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100334 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
335 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
336 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
337 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
338 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200339 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
340 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100341 * (see @sync_tsf)
342 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
343 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700344 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800345 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200346 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
347 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
348 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300349 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100350 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200351 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
352 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100353 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
354 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100355 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200356 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200357 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
358 * implies disabled
359 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300360 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
361 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
362 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
363 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100364 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
365 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
366 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200367 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200368 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
369 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
370 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300371 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
372 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200373 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300374 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
375 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200376 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100377 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100378 */
379struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200380 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100381 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200382 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530383 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100384 u16 aid;
385 /* erp related data */
386 bool use_cts_prot;
387 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300388 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200389 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800390 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700391 u16 beacon_int;
392 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200393 u64 sync_tsf;
394 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100395 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100396 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300397 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100398 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200399 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200400 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
401 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100402 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300403 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100404 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200405 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200406 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300407 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300408 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
409 size_t ssid_len;
410 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200411 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100412 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100413};
414
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800415/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200416 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800417 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700418 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800419 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100420 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200421 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
422 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
423 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
424 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
425 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
426 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
427 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
428 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
429 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
430 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
431 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200432 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200433 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
434 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200435 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200436 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
437 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200438 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200439 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200440 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
441 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
442 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
443 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
444 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
445 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
446 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
447 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200448 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
449 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
450 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300451 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
452 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200453 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
454 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
455 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600456 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
457 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
458 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100459 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
460 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
461 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200462 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
463 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200464 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
465 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100466 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
467 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
468 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200469 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
470 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
471 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
472 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100473 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
474 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
475 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100476 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
477 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
478 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200479 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
480 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
481 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400482 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200483 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
484 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100485 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
486 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
487 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
488 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200489 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
490 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
491 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530492 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
493 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
494 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200495 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
496 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
497 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200498 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
499 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530500 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
501 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
502 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200503 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
504 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
505 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200506 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
507 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200508 *
509 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
510 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800511 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200512enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200513 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200514 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
515 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
516 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
517 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
518 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
520 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
521 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
522 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
523 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
524 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
525 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600526 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100527 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200528 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200529 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100530 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100532 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100533 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200534 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400535 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200536 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100537 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200538 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530539 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200540 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530541 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200542 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200543 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200544};
545
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200546#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
547
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200548/**
549 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
550 *
551 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
552 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
553 *
554 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
555 */
556enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
557 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
558};
559
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200560/*
561 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
562 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
563 */
564#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
565 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
566 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
567 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
568 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100569 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200570 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200571 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200572
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530573/**
574 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
575 * Rate Control algorithm.
576 *
577 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
578 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
579 *
580 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
581 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
582 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
583 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
584 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100585 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
586 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530587 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
588 * Greenfield mode.
589 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100590 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
591 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
592 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530593 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
594 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
595 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
596 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
597 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200598enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
599 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
600 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
601 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
602
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100603 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200604 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
605 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
606 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
607 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
608 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100609 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
610 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
611 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800612};
613
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200614
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200615/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
616#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200617
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200618/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
619#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
620
621/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200622#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200623
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200624/* maximum number of rate table entries */
625#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
626
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200627/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200628 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200629 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200630 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
631 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200632 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200633 *
634 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
635 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
636 *
637 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
638 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200639 *
640 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
641 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
642 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
643 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
644 * information
645 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
646 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
647 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
648 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
649 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
650 * information should then contain
651 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
652 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
653 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200654 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200655struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
656 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100657 u16 count:5,
658 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000659} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200660
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100661#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
662
663static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
664 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
665{
666 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200667 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
668 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100669}
670
671static inline u8
672ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
673{
674 return rate->idx & 0xF;
675}
676
677static inline u8
678ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
679{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200680 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100681}
682
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200683/**
684 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200685 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200686 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
687 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
688 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
689 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
690 *
691 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200692 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200693 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100694 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700695 * @control: union for control data
696 * @status: union for status data
697 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100698 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700699 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100700 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700701 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200702 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200703 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200704struct ieee80211_tx_info {
705 /* common information */
706 u32 flags;
707 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200708
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200709 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100710
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100711 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100712
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200713 union {
714 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200715 union {
716 /* rate control */
717 struct {
718 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
719 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
720 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200721 u8 use_rts:1;
722 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200723 u8 short_preamble:1;
724 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200725 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200726 };
727 /* only needed before rate control */
728 unsigned long jiffies;
729 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200730 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
732 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200733 u32 flags;
734 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200735 } control;
736 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200737 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200738 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200739 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100740 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200741 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300742 u16 tx_time;
743 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200744 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200745 struct {
746 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
747 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200748 u8 pad[4];
749
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200750 void *rate_driver_data[
751 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
752 };
753 void *driver_data[
754 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200755 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700756};
757
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300758/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200759 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
760 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200761 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
762 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
763 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200764 *
765 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
766 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
767 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
768 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
769 */
770struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
771 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
772 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
773 const u8 *common_ies;
774 size_t common_ie_len;
775};
776
777
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200778static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
779{
780 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
781}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400782
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200783static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
784{
785 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
786}
787
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200788/**
789 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
790 *
791 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
792 *
793 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
794 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
795 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
796 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
797 *
798 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
799 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
800 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
801 */
802static inline void
803ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
804{
805 int i;
806
807 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
808 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
809 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
810 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
811 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
812 /* clear the rate counts */
813 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
814 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
815
816 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200817 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200818 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
819 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
820 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
821}
822
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400823
824/**
825 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
826 *
827 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
828 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
829 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
830 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400831 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
832 * verification has been done by the hardware.
833 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
834 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
835 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400836 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
837 * the frame.
838 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
839 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800840 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100841 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
842 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
843 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800844 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
845 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
846 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200847 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200848 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100849 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200850 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
851 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100852 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
853 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200854 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
855 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
856 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200857 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
858 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
859 * each A-MPDU
860 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
861 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
862 * monitoring purposes only
863 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
864 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
865 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
866 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
867 * on this subframe
868 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
869 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200870 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200871 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200872 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
873 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200874 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
875 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
876 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
877 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
878 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
879 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
880 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
881 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
882 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400883 */
884enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200885 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
886 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
887 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
888 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
889 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
890 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800891 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200892 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
893 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
894 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
895 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
896 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
897 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
898 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
899 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
900 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
901 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
902 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
903 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
904 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800905 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100906 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200907 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200908 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200909 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
910 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200911 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400912};
913
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200914#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
915
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400916/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200917 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
918 *
919 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
920 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
921 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
922 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
923 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200924 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200925 */
926enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
927 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
928 RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(1),
929 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200930 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(3),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200931};
932
933/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400934 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
935 *
936 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
937 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200938 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200939 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900940 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
941 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200942 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
943 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100944 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400945 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200946 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
947 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
948 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200949 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
950 * values were filled.
951 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
952 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400953 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200954 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100955 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
956 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400957 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200958 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200959 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200960 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
961 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
962 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400963 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700964struct ieee80211_rx_status {
965 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200966 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200967 u32 ampdu_reference;
968 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200969 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200970 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200971 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100972 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200973 u8 rx_flags;
974 u8 band;
975 u8 antenna;
976 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200977 u8 chains;
978 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200979 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700980};
981
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400982/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400983 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
984 *
985 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
986 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100987 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
988 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
989 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +0200990 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
991 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
992 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
993 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
994 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
995 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
996 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200997 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
998 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
999 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1000 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1001 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001002 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1003 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001004 */
1005enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001006 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001007 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001008 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001009 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001010};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001011
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001012
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001013/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001014 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1015 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001016 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001017 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001018 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001019 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001020 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001021 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001022 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001023 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001024 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1025 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001026 */
1027enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001028 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001029 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001030 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001031 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001032 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1033 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1034 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001035 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001036};
1037
1038/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001039 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1040 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001041 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1042 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1043 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1044 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1045 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001046 */
1047enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1048 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1049 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1050 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1051 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1052
1053 /* keep last */
1054 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1055};
1056
1057/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001058 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1059 *
1060 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1061 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001062 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1063 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001064 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001065 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001066 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1067 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1068 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1069 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001070 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1071 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1072 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001073 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1074 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1075 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1076 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001077 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1078 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001079 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001080 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001081 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001082 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001083 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001084 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1085 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001086 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001087 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1088 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001089 *
1090 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1091 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001092 * configured for an HT channel.
1093 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1094 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001095 */
1096struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001097 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001098 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001099 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001100
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001101 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001102 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001103
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001104 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1105
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001106 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001107 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001108 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001109};
1110
1111/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001112 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1113 *
1114 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1115 * operation.
1116 *
1117 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1118 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1119 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1120 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001121 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1122 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001123 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1124 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001125 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001126 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1127 */
1128struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1129 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001130 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001131 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001132 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001133 u8 count;
1134};
1135
1136/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001137 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1138 *
1139 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1140 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001141 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1142 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1143 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1144 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001145 */
1146enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1147 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001148 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001149};
1150
1151/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001152 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1153 *
1154 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1155 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1156 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001157 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001158 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1159 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001160 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001161 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1162 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001163 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1164 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1165 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001166 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1167 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1168 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1169 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001170 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1171 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001172 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1173 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1174 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1175 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1176 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001177 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001178 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001179 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001180 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1181 * sizeof(void *).
1182 */
1183struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001184 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001185 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001186 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001187 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001188 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001189
1190 u8 cab_queue;
1191 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1192
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001193 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1194
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001195 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001196
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001197#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1198 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1199#endif
1200
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001201 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001202 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001203};
1204
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001205static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1206{
1207#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001208 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001209#endif
1210 return false;
1211}
1212
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001213/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001214 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1215 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1216 *
1217 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1218 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1219 *
1220 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1221 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1222 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1223 */
1224struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1225
1226/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001227 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1228 *
1229 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1230 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1231 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001232 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1233 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivca34e3b2014-07-29 15:38:53 +03001234 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1235 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001236 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1237 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1238 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001239 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1240 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001241 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001242 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1243 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001244 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001245 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001246 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivca34e3b2014-07-29 15:38:53 +03001247 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1248 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1249 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001250 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1251 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1252 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1253 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1254 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1255 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1256 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001257 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1258 * driver for a CCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1259 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001260 */
1261enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001262 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1263 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1264 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1265 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1266 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1267 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1268 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001269};
1270
1271/**
1272 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1273 *
1274 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1275 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1276 *
1277 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1278 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001279 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001280 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001281 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1282 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1283 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001284 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1285 * data block:
1286 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1287 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1288 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001289 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1290 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001291 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001292struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001293 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001294 u8 icv_len;
1295 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001296 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001297 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001298 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001299 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001300 u8 key[0];
1301};
1302
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001303/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001304 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1305 *
1306 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1307 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1308 *
1309 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1310 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1311 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1312 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1313 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1314 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1315 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1316 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1317 * key_idx value calculation:
1318 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1319 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1320 */
1321struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1322 u32 cipher;
1323 u16 iftype;
1324 u8 hdr_len;
1325 u8 pn_len;
1326 u8 pn_off;
1327 u8 key_idx_off;
1328 u8 key_idx_mask;
1329 u8 key_idx_shift;
1330 u8 mic_len;
1331};
1332
1333/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001334 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1335 *
1336 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1337 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1338 *
1339 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1340 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1341 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001342enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001343 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001344};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001345
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001346/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001347 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1348 *
1349 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1350 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1351 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1352 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1353 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1354 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1355 */
1356enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1357 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1358 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1359 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1360 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1361 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1362 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1363};
1364
1365/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001366 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1367 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1368 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1369 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1370 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1371 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1372 *
1373 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1374 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1375 */
1376enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1377 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1378 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1379 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1380 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1381};
1382
1383/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001384 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1385 *
1386 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001387 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001388 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1389 */
1390struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1391 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1392 struct {
1393 s8 idx;
1394 u8 count;
1395 u8 count_cts;
1396 u8 count_rts;
1397 u16 flags;
1398 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1399};
1400
1401/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001402 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1403 *
1404 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1405 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1406 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1407 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1408 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001409 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001410 *
1411 * @addr: MAC address
1412 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001413 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001414 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1415 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berga74a8c82014-07-22 14:50:47 +02001416 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001417 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1418 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001419 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1420 * if wme is supported.
1421 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001422 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001423 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1424 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1425 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1426 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001427 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001428 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001429 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001430 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1431 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001432 */
1433struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001434 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001435 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1436 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001437 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001438 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001439 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001440 u8 uapsd_queues;
1441 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001442 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001443 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001444 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001445 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001446 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001447 bool tdls_initiator;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001448
1449 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001450 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001451};
1452
1453/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001454 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1455 *
1456 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301457 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001458 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001459 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1460 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1461 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001462enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001463 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1464};
1465
1466/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001467 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1468 *
1469 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1470 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1471 */
1472struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1473 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1474};
1475
1476/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001477 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1478 *
1479 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1480 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1481 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1482 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1483 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1484 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001485 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1486 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1487 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1488 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1489 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1490 * algorithm.
1491 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1492 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1493 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1494 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1495 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1496 * CCK frames.
1497 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001498 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1499 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1500 * the FCS at the end.
1501 *
1502 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1503 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1504 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1505 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1506 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1507 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001508 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001509 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001510 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1511 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1512 *
1513 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1514 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1515 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001516 *
1517 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1518 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1519 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1520 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1521 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001522 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1523 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1524 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1525 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1526 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001527 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1528 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1529 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301530 *
1531 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1532 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001533 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001534 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1535 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1536 *
1537 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1538 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1539 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1540 *
1541 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1542 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001543 *
1544 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1545 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001546 *
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001547 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1548 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1549 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1550 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301551 *
1552 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1553 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1554 * the stack.
1555 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001556 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001557 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1558 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001559 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001560 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1561 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1562 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001563 *
1564 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1565 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1566 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1567 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1568 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1569 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001570 *
1571 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1572 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1573 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1574 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1575 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1576 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001577 *
1578 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1579 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1580 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001581 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001582 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1583 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1584 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001585 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001586 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1587 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1588 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1589 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001590 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1591 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1592 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1593 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001594 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001595 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1596 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1597 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001598 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1599 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1600 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001601 *
1602 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1603 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001604 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001605 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1606 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1607 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1608 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001609 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1610 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1611 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1612 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001613 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001614 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1615 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1616 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001617 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1618 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001619 */
1620enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001621 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001622 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1623 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001624 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1625 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001626 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001627 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001628 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001629 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1630 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1631 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1632 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1633 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1634 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001635 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001636 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
1637 /* free slot */
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001638 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301639 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001640 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001641 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001642 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001643 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001644 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001645 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001646 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001647 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001648 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001649 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001650 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001651 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001652};
1653
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001654/**
1655 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001656 *
1657 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1658 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1659 *
1660 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1661 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1662 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001663 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1664 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001665 *
1666 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1667 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001668 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1669 * along with this structure.
1670 *
1671 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1672 *
1673 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1674 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1675 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001676 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1677 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001678 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001679 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001680 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001681 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001682 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001683 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001684 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001685 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001686 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1687 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1688 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001689 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1690 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1691 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001692 *
1693 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1694 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001695 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1696 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001697 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1698 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001699 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001700 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1701 * can handle.
1702 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1703 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001704 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001705 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001706 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1707 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1708 * aggregation.
1709 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1710 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1711 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001712 *
1713 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1714 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1715 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001716 *
1717 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1718 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001719 *
1720 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1721 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1722 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1723 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001724 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001725 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1726 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1727 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1728 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001729 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1730 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1731 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001732 *
1733 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1734 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1735 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1736 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1737 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1738 * neither enabled.
1739 *
1740 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1741 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1742 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001743 *
1744 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1745 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1746 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001747 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001748struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001749 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001750 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001751 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001752 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001753 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001754 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001755 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001756 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001757 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001758 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001759 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001760 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001761 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001762 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001763 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001764 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001765 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001766 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001767 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001768 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001769 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001770 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001771 u8 uapsd_queues;
1772 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001773 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1774 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001775};
1776
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001777/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001778 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1779 *
1780 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1781 * @req: cfg80211 request.
1782 */
1783struct ieee80211_scan_request {
1784 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
1785
1786 /* Keep last */
1787 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
1788};
1789
1790/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001791 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1792 *
1793 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1794 *
1795 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1796 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1797 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1798 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1799 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001800 *
1801 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001802 */
1803struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1804
1805/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001806 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1807 *
1808 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1809 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1810 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001811static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1812{
1813 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1814}
1815
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001816/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001817 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001818 *
1819 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1820 * @addr: the address to set
1821 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001822static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1823{
1824 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1825}
1826
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001827static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1828ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001829 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001830{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001831 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001832 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001833 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001834}
1835
1836static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1837ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001838 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001839{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001840 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001841 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001842 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001843}
1844
1845static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1846ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001847 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001848{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001849 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001850 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001851 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001852}
1853
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001854/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001855 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1856 * @hw: the hardware
1857 * @skb: the skb
1858 *
1859 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1860 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1861 */
1862void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1863
1864/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001865 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001866 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001867 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1868 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1869 *
1870 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1871 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001872 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1873 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1874 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001875 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1876 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1877 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001878 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1879 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1880 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1881 *
1882 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1883 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1884 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1885 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1886 *
1887 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1888 *
1889 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1890 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1891 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1892 * based on the receive flags.
1893 *
1894 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1895 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1896 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1897 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001898 *
1899 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1900 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1901 * handler.
1902 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001903 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001904 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1905 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001906 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001907 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001908 *
1909 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1910 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1911 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001912 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001913
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001914/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001915 * DOC: Powersave support
1916 *
1917 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1918 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001919 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1920 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1921 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1922 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1923 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1924 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1925 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1926 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001927 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001928 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1929 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1930 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001931 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1932 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001933 *
1934 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1935 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1936 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001937 *
1938 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1939 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1940 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1941 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001942 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1943 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001944 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001945 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001946 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1947 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1948 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1949 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1950 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1951 * periods.
1952 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001953 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001954 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1955 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1956 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1957 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1958 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1959 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1960 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1961 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1962 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1963 *
1964 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1965 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09001966 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001967 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1968 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1969 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1970 *
1971 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1972 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001973 */
1974
1975/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001976 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1977 *
1978 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08001979 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001980 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1981 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1982 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1983 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1984 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1985 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001986 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1987 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001988 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1989 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1990 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1991 *
1992 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1993 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1994 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1995 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1996 *
1997 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1998 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1999 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2000 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2001 * - a list of information element IDs
2002 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2003 *
2004 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2005 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2006 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2007 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2008 * vendor information elements.
2009 *
2010 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2011 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2012 *
2013 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2014 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2015 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2016 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2017 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2018 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2019 *
2020 *
2021 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2022 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2023 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2024 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2025 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2026 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2027 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2028 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2029 *
2030 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2031 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2032 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002033 */
2034
2035/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002036 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2037 *
2038 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2039 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2040 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2041 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2042 *
2043 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2044 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2045 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2046 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2047 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2048 * hardware flags.
2049 *
2050 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2051 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2052 * turned off otherwise.
2053 *
2054 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2055 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2056 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2057 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2058 */
2059
2060/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002061 * DOC: Frame filtering
2062 *
2063 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2064 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2065 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2066 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2067 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2068 *
2069 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2070 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2071 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2072 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002073 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2074 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2075 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2076 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2077 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2078 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2079 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002080 *
2081 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2082 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2083 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2084 * or dropped.
2085 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002086 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2087 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2088 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2089 * the flag, but not clear it.
2090 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2091 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2092 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2093 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2094 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2095 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2096 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2097 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002098 */
2099
2100/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002101 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2102 *
2103 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2104 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2105 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2106 *
2107 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2108 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2109 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2110 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2111 * the driver code.
2112 *
2113 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2114 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2115 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2116 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2117 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2118 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2119 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2120 *
2121 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2122 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2123 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2124 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2125 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2126 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2127 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2128 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2129 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2130 * @sta_notify callback.
2131 *
2132 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2133 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2134 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2135 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2136 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2137 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2138 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002139 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002140 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2141 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2142 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2143 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2144 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2145 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2146 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002147 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2148 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2149 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002150 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2151 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2152 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2153 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2154 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2155 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2156 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2157 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2158 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2159 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2160 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2161 *
2162 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2163 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2164 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2165 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2166 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2167 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2168 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2169 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2170 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2171 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002172 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002173 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2174 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2175 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2176 *
2177 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2178 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2179 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2180 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2181 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002182 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002183 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2184 *
2185 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2186 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2187 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2188 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002189 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002190 *
2191 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2192 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2193 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2194 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002195 */
2196
2197/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002198 * DOC: HW queue control
2199 *
2200 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2201 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2202 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2203 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2204 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2205 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2206 *
2207 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2208 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2209 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2210 *
2211 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2212 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2213 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2214 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2215 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2216 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2217 * the hardware queue.
2218 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2219 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2220 *
2221 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2222 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2223 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2224 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2225 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2226 *
2227 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2228 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2229 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2230 * off-channel queue: 9
2231 *
2232 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2233 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2234 *
2235 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2236 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2237 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2238 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2239 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2240 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2241 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2242 *
2243 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2244 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2245 *
2246 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2247 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2248 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2249 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2250 */
2251
2252/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002253 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2254 *
2255 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2256 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2257 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2258 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2259 *
2260 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2261 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2262 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2263 *
2264 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2265 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2266 * multicast address.
2267 *
2268 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2269 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2270 *
2271 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2272 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2273 *
2274 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2275 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2276 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2277 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2278 * honour this flag if possible.
2279 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002280 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002281 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002282 *
2283 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002284 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002285 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2286 * those addressed to this station.
2287 *
2288 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002289 */
2290enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2291 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2292 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2293 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2294 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2295 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2296 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2297 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002298 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002299 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002300};
2301
2302/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002303 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2304 *
2305 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2306 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002307 *
2308 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2309 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002310 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002311 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2312 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002313 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2314 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2315 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002316 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002317 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2318 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2319 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2320 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2321 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2322 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2323 * session is gone and removes the station.
2324 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2325 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2326 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2327 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002328 */
2329enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2330 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2331 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002332 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002333 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2334 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2335 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002336 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002337};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002338
2339/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002340 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2341 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002342 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2343 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002344 */
2345enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2346 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002347 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002348};
2349
2350/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002351 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2352 *
2353 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002354 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2355 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2356 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002357 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002358 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2359 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2360 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002361 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2362 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002363 */
2364enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2365 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2366 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002367 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002368 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002369};
2370
2371/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002372 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2373 *
2374 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2375 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2376 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2377 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2378 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2379 *
2380 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2381 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2382 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2383 */
2384enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2385 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2386 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2387};
2388
2389/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002390 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2391 *
2392 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2393 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2394 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2395 *
2396 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2397 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2398 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002399 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002400 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002401 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002402 *
2403 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2404 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2405 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2406 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2407 * or zero.
2408 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2409 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2410 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002411 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002412 *
2413 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2414 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2415 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2416 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002417 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2418 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002419 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002420 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002421 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2422 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2423 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2424 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2425 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002426 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2427 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2428 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2429 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002430 *
2431 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2432 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2433 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2434 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2435 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2436 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002437 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2438 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2439 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2440 * in suspend().
2441 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002442 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002443 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002444 * and @stop must be implemented.
2445 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2446 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2447 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2448 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2449 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002450 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002451 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002452 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2453 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2454 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2455 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2456 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2457 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002458 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2459 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2460 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2461 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2462 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2463 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2464 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002465 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002466 *
2467 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2468 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002469 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002470 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002471 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002472 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2473 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2474 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2475 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2476 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002477 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2478 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002479 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002480 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2481 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2482 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2483 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002484 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2485 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002486 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002487 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002488 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002489 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002490 *
2491 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002492 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2493 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002494 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002495 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002496 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002497 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002498 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2499 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2500 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002501 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002502 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002503 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2504 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2505 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2506 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2507 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2508 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002509 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2510 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2511 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2512 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002513 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002514 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002515 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2516 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002517 * that power save is disabled.
2518 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2519 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2520 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2521 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2522 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2523 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2524 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002525 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002526 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002527 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2528 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2529 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2530 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2531 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2532 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2533 * The callback can sleep.
2534 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002535 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2536 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2537 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2538 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2539 *
2540 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002541 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002542 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002543 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2544 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002545 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002546 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002547 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2548 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2549 * this notification.
2550 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002551 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002552 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2553 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002554 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002555 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002556 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2557 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2558 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002559 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002560 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002561 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2562 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2563 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2564 * The callback can sleep.
2565 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002566 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002567 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002568 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002569 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2570 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2571 *
2572 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002573 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2574 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2575 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2576 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2577 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002578 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302579 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2580 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2581 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2582 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2583 *
2584 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2585 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2586 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002587 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002588 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2589 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2590 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002591 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002592 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2593 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2594 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2595 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002596 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2597 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2598 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2599 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2600 * The callback can sleep.
2601 *
2602 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2603 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2604 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2605 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2606 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002607 * The callback can sleep.
2608 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002609 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2610 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2611 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2612 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2613 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2614 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2615 * Must be atomic.
2616 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002617 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002618 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002619 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002620 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002621 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002622 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002623 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002624 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002625 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002626 *
2627 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002628 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002629 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002630 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002631 *
2632 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2633 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2634 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2635 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002636 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002637 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002638 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2639 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2640 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002641 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002642 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002643 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002644 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2645 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2646 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2647 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002648 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002649 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002650 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2651 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002652 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2653 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2654 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2655 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2656 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2657 * - TX: 1.....7
2658 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2659 * - TX: 8..1...
2660 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2661 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2662 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2663 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2664 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002665 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002666 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002667 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002668 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2669 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002670 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2671 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2672 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002673 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002674 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002675 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2676 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002677 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2678 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2679 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002680 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002681 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2682 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002683 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002684 *
2685 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002686 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2687 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2688 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2689 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002690 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002691 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002692 *
2693 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2694 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2695 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2696 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002697 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002698 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2699 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2700 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2701 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2702 *
2703 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002704 *
2705 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2706 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2707 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2708 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2709 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2710 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002711 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002712 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2713 * must be accepted in this case.
2714 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002715 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2716 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002717 *
2718 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2719 *
2720 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302721 *
2722 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2723 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302724 *
2725 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2726 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2727 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002728 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2729 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002730 *
2731 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2732 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2733 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2734 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002735 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002736 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2737 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2738 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2739 * more-data bit must always be set.
2740 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2741 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002742 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2743 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2744 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2745 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2746 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2747 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002748 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2749 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2750 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002751 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2752 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002753 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002754 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002755 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002756 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2757 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2758 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002759 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002760 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2761 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2762 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2763 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002764 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002765 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002766 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2767 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2768 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002769 *
2770 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2771 *
2772 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2773 *
2774 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2775 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2776 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002777 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2778 * and can sleep.
2779 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002780 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2781 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2782 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2783 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2784 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2785 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2786 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2787 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2788 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2789 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2790 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2791 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002792 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03002793 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
2794 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
2795 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
2796 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
2797 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
2798 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
2799 * 2 * (DTIM period).
2800 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
2801 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002802 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2803 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2804 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2805 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2806 * channel context with different settings
2807 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2808 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2809 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2810 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03002811 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
2812 * another, as specified in the list of
2813 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
2814 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
2815 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002816 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2817 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2818 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2819 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2820 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2821 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2822 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002823 *
2824 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2825 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002826 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2827 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2828 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2829 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002830 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2831 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2832 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002833 *
2834 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2835 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2836 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002837 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002838 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2839 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002840 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002841 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002842 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2843 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03002844 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2845 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
2846 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
2847 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03002848 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
2849 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
2850 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002851 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002852 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2853 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2854 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2855 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02002856 *
2857 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
2858 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
2859 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002860 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002861struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002862 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2863 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2864 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002865 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002866 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002867#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2868 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2869 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002870 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002871#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002872 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002873 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002874 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2875 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002876 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002877 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002878 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002879 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002880 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2881 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2882 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2883 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002884
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002885 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2886 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2887
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002888 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002889 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002890 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2891 unsigned int changed_flags,
2892 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002893 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002894 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2895 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002896 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002897 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04002898 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002899 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01002900 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2901 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2902 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2903 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002904 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2905 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2906 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002907 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2908 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02002909 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002910 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002911 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002913 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2914 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2915 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02002916 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002917 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002918 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002919 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2920 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002921 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2922 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002923 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2924 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002925 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002926 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002927 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2928 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2929 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2930 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302931#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2932 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2934 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2935 struct dentry *dir);
2936 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2937 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2938 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2939 struct dentry *dir);
2940#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002941 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002942 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002943 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2944 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2945 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2946 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002947 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2948 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2949 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002950 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2951 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2952 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2953 u32 changed);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02002954 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02002955 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002956 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03002957 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2958 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2959 u64 tsf);
2960 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002961 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002962 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01002963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002964 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002965 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2966 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02002967 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2968 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002969 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002970 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002971#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002972 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2973 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002974 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2975 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2976 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002977#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002978 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2979 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002980 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03002981 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002982 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09002983 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2984 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002985
2986 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02002987 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002988 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002989 int duration,
2990 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002991 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002992 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2993 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2994 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302995 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302996 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2997 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002998 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02002999 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07003000 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003001
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003002 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3003 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3004 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3005 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3006 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003007 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3008 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3009 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3010 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3011 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003012
3013 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3014 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3015 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3016 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3017 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3018 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3020 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03003021 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3022 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003023
3024 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3025 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003026
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003027 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3028 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3029
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003030 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3031 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3032 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3033 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3034 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3035 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3036 u32 changed);
3037 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3038 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3039 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3040 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3042 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003043 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3044 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3045 int n_vifs,
3046 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003047
3048 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003049
3050#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3051 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3053 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3054#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003055 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3056 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3057 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003058 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3059 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3060 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003061
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003062 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3064
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003065 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3066 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003067 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003068};
3069
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003070/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003071 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3072 *
3073 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3074 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3075 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3076 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3077 * @priv_data_len.
3078 *
3079 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3080 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3081 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3082 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3083 *
3084 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3085 */
3086struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3087 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3088 const char *requested_name);
3089
3090/**
3091 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003092 *
3093 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3094 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3095 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3096 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3097 * @priv_data_len.
3098 *
3099 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3100 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003101 *
3102 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003103 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003104static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003105struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003106 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3107{
3108 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3109}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003110
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003111/**
3112 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3113 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003114 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3115 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3116 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003117 *
3118 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003119 *
3120 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003121 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003122int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3123
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003124/**
3125 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3126 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3127 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3128 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3129 */
3130struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3131 int throughput;
3132 int blink_time;
3133};
3134
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003135/**
3136 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3137 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3138 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3139 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3140 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3141 */
3142enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3143 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3144 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3145 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3146};
3147
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003148#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003149char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3150char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3151char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3152char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3153char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3154 unsigned int flags,
3155 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3156 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003157#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003158/**
3159 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3160 *
3161 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3162 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3163 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3164 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3165 *
3166 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003167 *
3168 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003169 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003170static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3171{
3172#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3173 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3174#else
3175 return NULL;
3176#endif
3177}
3178
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003179/**
3180 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3181 *
3182 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3183 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3184 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3185 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3186 *
3187 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003188 *
3189 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003190 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003191static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3192{
3193#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3194 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3195#else
3196 return NULL;
3197#endif
3198}
3199
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003200/**
3201 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3202 *
3203 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3204 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3205 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3206 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3207 *
3208 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003209 *
3210 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003211 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003212static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3213{
3214#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3215 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3216#else
3217 return NULL;
3218#endif
3219}
3220
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003221/**
3222 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3223 *
3224 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3225 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3226 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3227 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3228 *
3229 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003230 *
3231 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003232 */
3233static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3234{
3235#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3236 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3237#else
3238 return NULL;
3239#endif
3240}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003241
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003242/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003243 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3244 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003245 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003246 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3247 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3248 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003249 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3250 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3251 *
3252 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003253 */
3254static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003255ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003256 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3257 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3258{
3259#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003260 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003261 blink_table_len);
3262#else
3263 return NULL;
3264#endif
3265}
3266
3267/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003268 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3269 *
3270 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3271 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3272 *
3273 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3274 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003275void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3276
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003277/**
3278 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3279 *
3280 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3281 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003282 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003283 *
3284 * @hw: the hardware to free
3285 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003286void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3287
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003288/**
3289 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3290 *
3291 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3292 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3293 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3294 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3295 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3296 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3297 *
3298 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3299 */
3300void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3301
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003302/**
3303 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3304 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3305 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3306 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3307 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3308 * @poll: poll function
3309 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003310 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003311 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003312 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003313void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3314 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3315 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3316 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003317
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003318/**
3319 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3320 *
3321 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003322 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3323 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3324 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3325 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003326 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003327 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003328 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3329 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003330 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3331 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003332 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003333 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003334 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003335 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3336 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003337 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003338void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003339
3340/**
3341 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3342 *
3343 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003344 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3345 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003346 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003347 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3348 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003349 *
3350 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3351 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003352 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003353void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003354
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003355/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003356 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3357 *
3358 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3359 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3360 *
3361 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003362 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3363 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003364 *
3365 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3366 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3367 */
3368static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3369 struct sk_buff *skb)
3370{
3371 local_bh_disable();
3372 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3373 local_bh_enable();
3374}
3375
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003376/**
3377 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3378 *
3379 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3380 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3381 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3382 *
3383 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3384 *
3385 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3386 * each other.
3387 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003388 * @sta: currently connected sta
3389 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003390 *
3391 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003392 */
3393int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3394
3395/**
3396 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3397 * (in process context)
3398 *
3399 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3400 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3401 * applies.
3402 *
3403 * @sta: currently connected sta
3404 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003405 *
3406 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003407 */
3408static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3409 bool start)
3410{
3411 int ret;
3412
3413 local_bh_disable();
3414 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3415 local_bh_enable();
3416
3417 return ret;
3418}
3419
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003420/*
3421 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3422 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3423 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003424#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003425
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003426/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003427 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003428 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003429 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3430 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003431 *
3432 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003433 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3434 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003435 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003436 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3437 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3438 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3439 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3440 *
3441 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3442 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3443 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3444 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3445 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3446 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3447 *
3448 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3449 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3450 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3451 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3452 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003453 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003454void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3455 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003456
3457/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003458 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3459 *
3460 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3461 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3462 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3463 *
3464 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3465 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3466 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3467 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3468 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3469 */
3470void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3471 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3472 struct sk_buff *skb,
3473 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3474 int max_rates);
3475
3476/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003477 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3478 *
3479 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3480 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3481 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3482 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003483 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3484 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003485 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003486 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3487 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003488 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003489 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3490 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003491 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003492void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003493 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003494
3495/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003496 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3497 *
3498 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3499 *
3500 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3501 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3502 * for a single hardware.
3503 *
3504 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3505 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3506 */
3507static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3508 struct sk_buff *skb)
3509{
3510 local_bh_disable();
3511 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3512 local_bh_enable();
3513}
3514
3515/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003516 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003517 *
3518 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3519 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3520 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003521 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3522 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003523 *
3524 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3525 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003526 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003527void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003528 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003529
3530/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003531 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3532 *
3533 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3534 * connected STA.
3535 *
3536 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3537 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3538 */
3539void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3540
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003541#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3542
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003543/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003544 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3545 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3546 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003547 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3548 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3549 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003550 */
3551struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3552 u16 tim_offset;
3553 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003554
3555 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003556};
3557
3558/**
3559 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3560 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3561 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3562 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3563 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3564 *
3565 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3566 * obtain the beacon template.
3567 *
3568 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3569 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003570 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3571 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003572 *
3573 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3574 *
3575 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3576 */
3577struct sk_buff *
3578ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3579 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3580 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3581
3582/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003583 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3584 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003585 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003586 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3587 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3588 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3589 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3590 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3591 *
3592 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003593 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003594 *
3595 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3596 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003597 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3598 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003599 *
3600 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003601 *
3602 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003603 */
3604struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3605 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3606 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3607
3608/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003609 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3610 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003611 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003612 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003613 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003614 *
3615 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003616 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003617static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3618 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3619{
3620 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3621}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003622
3623/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003624 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3625 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3626 *
3627 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3628 * This function is called implicitly when
3629 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3630 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3631 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3632 *
3633 * Return: new csa counter value
3634 */
3635u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3636
3637/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003638 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3639 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3640 *
3641 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003642 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003643 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3644 */
3645void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3646
3647/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003648 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003649 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3650 *
3651 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3652 */
3653bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3654
3655
3656/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003657 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3658 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3659 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3660 *
3661 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3662 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3663 *
3664 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003665 *
3666 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003667 */
3668struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3669 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3670
3671/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003672 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3673 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3674 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3675 *
3676 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3677 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3678 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3679 *
3680 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3681 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003682 *
3683 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003684 */
3685struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3686 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3687
3688/**
3689 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3690 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3691 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3692 *
3693 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3694 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3695 * BSSID and address is used.
3696 *
3697 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3698 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003699 *
3700 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003701 */
3702struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3703 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3704
3705/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003706 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3707 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3709 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3710 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003711 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003712 *
3713 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3714 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003715 *
3716 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003717 */
3718struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3719 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3720 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003721 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003722
3723/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003724 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3725 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003726 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003727 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3728 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003729 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003730 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3731 *
3732 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3733 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3734 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3735 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3736 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003737void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003738 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003739 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003740 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3741
3742/**
3743 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3744 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003745 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003746 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003747 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003748 *
3749 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3750 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3751 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003752 *
3753 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003754 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003755__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3756 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003757 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003758
3759/**
3760 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3761 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003762 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003763 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3764 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003765 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003766 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3767 *
3768 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3769 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3770 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3771 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3772 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003773void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3774 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003775 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003776 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003777 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3778
3779/**
3780 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3781 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003782 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003783 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003784 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003785 *
3786 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3787 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3788 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003789 *
3790 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003791 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003792__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3793 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003794 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003795 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003796
3797/**
3798 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3799 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003800 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003801 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003802 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003803 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003804 *
3805 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3806 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003807 *
3808 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003809 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003810__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003812 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003813 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003814 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003815
3816/**
3817 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3818 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003819 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003820 *
3821 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3822 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3823 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3824 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003825 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3826 *
3827 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3828 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003829 *
3830 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3831 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3832 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3833 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3834 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3835 * use common code for all beacons.
3836 */
3837struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003838ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003839
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003840/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003841 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3842 *
3843 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3844 *
3845 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3846 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3847 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3848 */
3849void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3850 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3851
3852/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003853 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003854 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003855 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3856 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003857 *
3858 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003859 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3860 * with this P1K
3861 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003862 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003863static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3864 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3865{
3866 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3867 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3868 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3869
3870 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3871}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003872
3873/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02003874 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3875 *
3876 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3877 * and transmitter address.
3878 *
3879 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3880 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3881 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3882 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3883 */
3884void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3885 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3886
3887/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003888 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3889 *
3890 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3891 * in the packet.
3892 *
3893 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3894 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3895 * encrypted with this key
3896 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3897 */
3898void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3899 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003900
3901/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03003902 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3903 *
3904 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3905 * previously installed master key.
3906 *
3907 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3908 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3909 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3910 */
3911void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3912 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3913
3914/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02003915 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3916 *
3917 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3918 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3919 * reverse order than in packet)
3920 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3921 * reverse order than in packet)
3922 */
3923struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3924 union {
3925 struct {
3926 u32 iv32;
3927 u16 iv16;
3928 } tkip;
3929 struct {
3930 u8 pn[6];
3931 } ccmp;
3932 struct {
3933 u8 pn[6];
3934 } aes_cmac;
3935 };
3936};
3937
3938/**
3939 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3940 *
3941 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3942 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3943 *
3944 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3945 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3946 * offloaded to the device.
3947 *
3948 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3949 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3950 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3951 */
3952void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3953 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3954
3955/**
3956 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3957 *
3958 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3959 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3960 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3961 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3962 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3963 *
3964 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3965 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3966 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3967 *
3968 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3969 * can be done concurrently.
3970 */
3971void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3972 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3973
3974/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02003975 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3976 *
3977 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3978 * @seq: new sequence data
3979 *
3980 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3981 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3982 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3983 * ARP requests.
3984 *
3985 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3986 * can be done concurrently.
3987 */
3988void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3989 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3990
3991/**
3992 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3993 *
3994 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3995 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3996 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3997 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3998 * @seq: new sequence data
3999 *
4000 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4001 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4002 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4003 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4004 *
4005 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4006 * can be done concurrently.
4007 */
4008void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4009 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4010
4011/**
4012 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4013 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4014 *
4015 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4016 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4017 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4018 *
4019 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4020 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4021 */
4022void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4023
4024/**
4025 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4026 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4027 * @keyconf: new key data
4028 *
4029 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4030 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4031 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4032 *
4033 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4034 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4035 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4036 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4037 *
4038 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4039 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4040 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4041 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4042 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4043 * of the reconfiguration.
4044 *
4045 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4046 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4047 *
4048 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4049 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4050 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4051 * the key that's being replaced.
4052 */
4053struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4054ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4055 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4056
4057/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004058 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4059 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4060 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4061 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4062 * @gfp: allocation flags
4063 */
4064void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4065 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4066
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004067/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004068 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4069 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4070 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4071 *
4072 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4073 */
4074void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4075
4076/**
4077 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4078 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4079 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4080 *
4081 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4082 */
4083void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4084
4085/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004086 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4087 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4088 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4089 *
4090 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004091 *
4092 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004093 */
4094
4095int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4096
4097/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004098 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4099 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4100 *
4101 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4102 */
4103void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4104
4105/**
4106 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4107 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4108 *
4109 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4110 */
4111void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4112
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004113/**
4114 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4115 *
4116 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4117 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004118 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4119 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004120 *
4121 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004122 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004123 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004124void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004125
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004126/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004127 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4128 *
4129 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4130 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4131 *
4132 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4133 */
4134void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4135
4136/**
4137 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4138 *
4139 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4140 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4141 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4142 * while associating, for instance.
4143 *
4144 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4145 */
4146void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4147
4148/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004149 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4150 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4151 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4152 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4153 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4154 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4155 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4156 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4157 */
4158enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4159 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4160 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4161};
4162
4163/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004164 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004165 *
4166 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4167 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004168 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4169 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4170 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004171 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004172 *
4173 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004174 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004175 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004176 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4177 */
4178void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004179 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004180 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004182 void *data);
4183
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004184/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004185 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4186 *
4187 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4188 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4189 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4190 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004191 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004192 *
4193 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004194 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004195 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4196 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4197 */
4198void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004199 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004200 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4201 u8 *mac,
4202 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4203 void *data);
4204
4205/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004206 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4207 *
4208 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4209 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4210 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4211 *
4212 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4213 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4214 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4215 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4216 */
4217void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4218 u32 iter_flags,
4219 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4220 u8 *mac,
4221 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4222 void *data);
4223
4224/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004225 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4226 *
4227 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4228 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4229 * function for them.
4230 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4231 *
4232 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4233 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4234 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4235 */
4236void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4237 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4238 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4239 void *data);
4240/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004241 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4242 *
4243 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4244 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4245 *
4246 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4247 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4248 */
4249void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4250
4251/**
4252 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4253 *
4254 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4255 * workqueue.
4256 *
4257 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4258 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4259 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4260 */
4261void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4262 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4263 unsigned long delay);
4264
4265/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004266 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004267 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004268 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304269 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004270 *
4271 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004272 *
4273 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4274 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4275 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4276 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304277int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4278 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004279
4280/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004281 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004282 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004283 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4284 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4285 *
4286 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004287 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4288 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004289 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004290void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004291 u16 tid);
4292
4293/**
4294 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004295 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004296 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004297 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004298 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004299 *
4300 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4301 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4302 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4303 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004304int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004305
4306/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004307 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004308 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004309 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4310 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4311 *
4312 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004313 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4314 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004315 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004316void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004317 u16 tid);
4318
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004319/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004320 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4321 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004322 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004323 * @addr: station's address
4324 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004325 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4326 *
4327 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004328 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4329 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004330struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004331 const u8 *addr);
4332
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004333/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004334 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004335 *
4336 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004337 * @addr: remote station's address
4338 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004339 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004340 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4341 *
4342 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004343 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4344 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004345 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4346 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4347 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4348 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4349 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4350 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4351 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004352 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004353 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004354 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004355struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4356 const u8 *addr,
4357 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004358
4359/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004360 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4361 * @hw: the hardware
4362 * @pubsta: the station
4363 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4364 *
4365 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4366 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4367 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4368 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4369 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4370 *
4371 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4372 * manner.
4373 *
4374 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4375 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4376 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4377 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4378 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4379 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4380 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4381 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4382 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4383 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4384 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4385 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4386 * woke up while blocked or not.
4387 */
4388void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4389 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4390
4391/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004392 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4393 * @pubsta: the station
4394 *
4395 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4396 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4397 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4398 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4399 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004400 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4401 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4402 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4403 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4404 *
4405 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4406 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4407 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4408 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004409 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004410void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004411
4412/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004413 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4414 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4415 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4416 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4417 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4418 *
4419 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4420 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4421 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4422 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4423 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4424 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004425 *
4426 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4427 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4428 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004429 */
4430void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4431 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4432 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4433 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4434 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4435 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4436 void *data),
4437 void *iter_data);
4438
4439/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004440 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4441 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4442 * @iter: iterator function
4443 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4444 *
4445 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4446 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4447 * places while calling into the driver.
4448 *
4449 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4450 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4451 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004452 *
4453 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4454 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4455 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4456 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004457 */
4458void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4459 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4460 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4461 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4462 void *data),
4463 void *iter_data);
4464
4465/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004466 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4467 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4468 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4469 *
4470 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4471 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4472 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4473 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4474 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004475 * %NULL.
4476 *
4477 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004478 */
4479struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4480 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4481
4482/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004483 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4484 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004485 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004486 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004487 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004488 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004489 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4490 */
4491void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004492
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004493/**
4494 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4495 *
4496 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4497 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004498 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004499 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4500 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004501 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4502 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004503 *
4504 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4505 * without connection recovery attempts.
4506 */
4507void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4508
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004509/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004510 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4511 *
4512 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4513 *
4514 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4515 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4516 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4517 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4518 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4519 *
4520 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4521 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4522 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4523 * disconnect normally later.
4524 *
4525 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4526 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4527 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4528 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4529 */
4530void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4531
4532/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004533 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4534 * rssi threshold triggered
4535 *
4536 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4537 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4538 * @gfp: context flags
4539 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004540 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004541 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4542 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4543 */
4544void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4545 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4546 gfp_t gfp);
4547
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004548/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004549 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4550 *
4551 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4552 */
4553void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4554
4555/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004556 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4557 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4558 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4559 *
4560 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4561 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4562 */
4563void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4564
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004565/**
4566 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4567 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004568 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004569 *
4570 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4571 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4572 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4573 */
4574void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4575 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4576
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004577/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004578 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4579 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4580 */
4581void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4582
4583/**
4584 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4585 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4586 */
4587void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4588
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004589/**
4590 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4591 *
4592 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4593 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4594 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4595 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4596 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4597 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4598 *
4599 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4600 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4601 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4602 */
4603void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4604 const u8 *addr);
4605
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004606/**
4607 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4608 *
4609 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4610 * buffer.
4611 *
4612 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4613 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4614 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4615 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4616 */
4617void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4618
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02004619/**
4620 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
4621 *
4622 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4623 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4624 * reordering.
4625 *
4626 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4627 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
4628 *
4629 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4630 * @addr: station mac address
4631 * @tid: the rx tid
4632 */
4633void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4634 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4635
4636/**
4637 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
4638 *
4639 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4640 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4641 * reordering.
4642 *
4643 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4644 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
4645 *
4646 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4647 * @addr: station mac address
4648 * @tid: the rx tid
4649 */
4650void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4651 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4652
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004653/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004654
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004655/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004656 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004657 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004658 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4659 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4660 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004661 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4662 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004663 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4664 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4665 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4666 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4667 * RTS threshold
4668 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4669 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004670 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004671 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4672 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004673 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004674 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004675 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004676 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004677struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4678 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4679 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4680 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4681 struct sk_buff *skb;
4682 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4683 bool rts, short_preamble;
4684 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004685 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004686 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004687 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004688};
4689
4690struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004691 const char *name;
4692 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004693 void (*free)(void *priv);
4694
4695 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4696 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004697 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004698 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304699 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004700 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004701 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4702 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004703 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4704 void *priv_sta);
4705
4706 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4707 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4708 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004709 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4710 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004711
4712 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4713 struct dentry *dir);
4714 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02004715
4716 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004717};
4718
4719static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4720 enum ieee80211_band band,
4721 int index)
4722{
4723 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4724}
4725
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004726/**
4727 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4728 *
4729 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4730 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4731 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4732 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4733 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4734 * not null.
4735 *
4736 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4737 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4738 *
4739 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4740 * that this may be null.
4741 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4742 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4743 */
4744bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4745 void *priv_sta,
4746 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4747
4748
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004749static inline s8
4750rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4751 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4752{
4753 int i;
4754
4755 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4756 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4757 return i;
4758
4759 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004760 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004761
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004762 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004763 return 0;
4764}
4765
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004766static inline
4767bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4768 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4769{
4770 unsigned int i;
4771
4772 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4773 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4774 return true;
4775 return false;
4776}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004777
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004778/**
4779 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4780 *
4781 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4782 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4783 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4784 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4785 *
4786 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4787 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4788 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4789 */
4790int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4791 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4792 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4793
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004794int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4795void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004796
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004797static inline bool
4798conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4799{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004800 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004801}
4802
4803static inline bool
4804conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4805{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004806 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4807 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004808}
4809
4810static inline bool
4811conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4812{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004813 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4814 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004815}
4816
4817static inline bool
4818conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4819{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004820 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004821}
4822
4823static inline bool
4824conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4825{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02004826 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
4827 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
4828 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004829}
4830
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004831static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4832ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4833{
4834 if (p2p) {
4835 switch (type) {
4836 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4837 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4838 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4839 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4840 default:
4841 break;
4842 }
4843 }
4844 return type;
4845}
4846
4847static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4848ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4849{
4850 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4851}
4852
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004853void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4854 int rssi_min_thold,
4855 int rssi_max_thold);
4856
4857void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004858
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004859/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004860 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004861 *
4862 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4863 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004864 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4865 *
4866 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4867 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004868 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004869int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4870
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004871/**
4872 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4873 * @vif: virtual interface
4874 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4875 * @gfp: allocation flags
4876 *
4877 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4878 */
4879void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4880 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4881 gfp_t gfp);
4882
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02004883/**
4884 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
4885 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4886 * @vif: virtual interface
4887 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
4888 * @band: the band to transmit on
4889 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
4890 *
4891 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
4892 */
4893bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4894 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
4895 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
4896
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01004897/**
4898 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
4899 *
4900 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
4901 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
4902 *
4903 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
4904 *
4905 * private:
4906 *
4907 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
4908 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
4909 */
4910struct ieee80211_noa_data {
4911 u32 next_tsf;
4912 bool has_next_tsf;
4913
4914 u8 absent;
4915
4916 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4917 struct {
4918 u32 start;
4919 u32 duration;
4920 u32 interval;
4921 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4922};
4923
4924/**
4925 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
4926 *
4927 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
4928 * @data: NoA tracking data
4929 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4930 *
4931 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
4932 */
4933int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
4934 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4935
4936/**
4937 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
4938 *
4939 * @data: NoA tracking data
4940 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4941 */
4942void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4943
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03004944/**
4945 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
4946 * @vif: virtual interface
4947 * @peer: the peer's destination address
4948 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
4949 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
4950 * @gfp: allocation flags
4951 *
4952 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
4953 */
4954void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
4955 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
4956 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03004957
4958/**
4959 * ieee80211_ie_split - split an IE buffer according to ordering
4960 *
4961 * @ies: the IE buffer
4962 * @ielen: the length of the IE buffer
4963 * @ids: an array with element IDs that are allowed before
4964 * the split
4965 * @n_ids: the size of the element ID array
4966 * @offset: offset where to start splitting in the buffer
4967 *
4968 * This function splits an IE buffer by updating the @offset
4969 * variable to point to the location where the buffer should be
4970 * split.
4971 *
4972 * It assumes that the given IE buffer is well-formed, this
4973 * has to be guaranteed by the caller!
4974 *
4975 * It also assumes that the IEs in the buffer are ordered
4976 * correctly, if not the result of using this function will not
4977 * be ordered correctly either, i.e. it does no reordering.
4978 *
4979 * The function returns the offset where the next part of the
4980 * buffer starts, which may be @ielen if the entire (remainder)
4981 * of the buffer should be used.
4982 */
4983size_t ieee80211_ie_split(const u8 *ies, size_t ielen,
4984 const u8 *ids, int n_ids, size_t offset);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004985#endif /* MAC80211_H */